27
Configuration of SAP Learning Solution/ SAP Enterprise Learning SAP enhancement package for SAP ERP 6.0

LSO Config

  • Upload
    -

  • View
    1.408

  • Download
    31

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: LSO Config

Configuration ofSAP Learning Solution

SAP Enterprise Learning

SAP enhancement packagefor SAP ERP 6 0

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 2

Copyright

copy Copyright 2007 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietarysoftware components of other software vendors

Microsoft Windows Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX S390 AS400OS390 OS400 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries zOS AFP Intelligent MinerWebSphere Netfinity Tivoli Informix i5OS POWER POWER5 OpenPower and PowerPCare trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation

Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation

UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc

HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg WorldWide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc

JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license fortechnology invented and implemented by Netscape

MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB Sweden

SAP R3 mySAP mySAPcom xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world All otherproduct and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companiesData contained in this document serves informational purposes only National productspecifications may vary

These materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAPAG and its affiliated companies (SAP Group) for informational purposes only withoutrepresentation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors oromissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products andservices are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying suchproducts and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting anadditional warranty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 3

Icons in Body Text

Icon Meaning

Caution

Example

Note

Recommendation

Syntax

Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types ofinformation at a glance For more information see Help on Help General InformationClasses and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of anyversion of SAP Library

Typographic Conventions

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters quoted from the screen These include fieldnames screen titles pushbuttons labels menu names menu pathsand menu options

Cross-references to other documentation

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text graphic titles and tabletitles

EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects These include report namesprogram names transaction codes table names and key concepts of aprogramming language when they are surrounded by body text forexample SELECT and INCLUDE

Example text Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and theirpaths messages names of variables and parameters source text andnames of installation upgrade and database tools

Example text Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation

ltExample textgt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in thesystem

EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8

System Connections 9

Creating an RFC Destination 9

Creating a Trusted Relationship 9

Importing the WAS Certificate 9

Swapping Public Keys 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9

Configuring Content Management 9

Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9

Configuring the Learning Portal 9

Configuring Content Player 9

Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9

Configuring Adobe Connect 9

Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9

Copying Logical Ports 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components

SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)

For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution

PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6

We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage

ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation

Document Storage LocationDocument Location

Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide

servicesapcominstguides

Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System

Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description

SAP Solution Manager

SAP Library helpsapcom

Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system

SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes

servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide

Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)

servicesapcomti

Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide

These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides

Implementation Guide (IMG)

This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7

configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess

Business Scenario Description

This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component

SAP Library

This documentation describes the different SAP components

System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample

Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system

Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed

Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios

You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade

Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed

Creating an RFC Destination

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)

R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 2: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 2

Copyright

copy Copyright 2007 SAP AG All rights reserved

No part of this publication may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or for any purposewithout the express permission of SAP AG The information contained herein may bechanged without prior notice

Some software products marketed by SAP AG and its distributors contain proprietarysoftware components of other software vendors

Microsoft Windows Outlook and PowerPoint are registered trademarks of MicrosoftCorporationIBM DB2 DB2 Universal Database OS2 Parallel Sysplex MVSESA AIX S390 AS400OS390 OS400 iSeries pSeries xSeries zSeries zOS AFP Intelligent MinerWebSphere Netfinity Tivoli Informix i5OS POWER POWER5 OpenPower and PowerPCare trademarks or registered trademarks of IBM Corporation

Adobe the Adobe logo Acrobat PostScript and Reader are either trademarks or registeredtrademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United States andor other countriesOracle is a registered trademark of Oracle Corporation

UNIX XOpen OSF1 and Motif are registered trademarks of the Open GroupCitrix ICA Program Neighborhood MetaFrame WinFrame VideoFrame and MultiWin aretrademarks or registered trademarks of Citrix Systems Inc

HTML XML XHTML and W3C are trademarks or registered trademarks of W3Creg WorldWide Web Consortium Massachusetts Institute of Technology

Java is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc

JavaScript is a registered trademark of Sun Microsystems Inc used under license fortechnology invented and implemented by Netscape

MaxDB is a trademark of MySQL AB Sweden

SAP R3 mySAP mySAPcom xApps xApp SAP NetWeaver and other SAP products andservices mentioned herein as well as their respective logos are trademarks or registeredtrademarks of SAP AG in Germany and in several other countries all over the world All otherproduct and service names mentioned are the trademarks of their respective companiesData contained in this document serves informational purposes only National productspecifications may vary

These materials are subject to change without notice These materials are provided by SAPAG and its affiliated companies (SAP Group) for informational purposes only withoutrepresentation or warranty of any kind and SAP Group shall not be liable for errors oromissions with respect to the materials The only warranties for SAP Group products andservices are those that are set forth in the express warranty statements accompanying suchproducts and services if any Nothing herein should be construed as constituting anadditional warranty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 3

Icons in Body Text

Icon Meaning

Caution

Example

Note

Recommendation

Syntax

Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types ofinformation at a glance For more information see Help on Help General InformationClasses and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of anyversion of SAP Library

Typographic Conventions

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters quoted from the screen These include fieldnames screen titles pushbuttons labels menu names menu pathsand menu options

Cross-references to other documentation

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text graphic titles and tabletitles

EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects These include report namesprogram names transaction codes table names and key concepts of aprogramming language when they are surrounded by body text forexample SELECT and INCLUDE

Example text Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and theirpaths messages names of variables and parameters source text andnames of installation upgrade and database tools

Example text Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation

ltExample textgt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in thesystem

EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8

System Connections 9

Creating an RFC Destination 9

Creating a Trusted Relationship 9

Importing the WAS Certificate 9

Swapping Public Keys 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9

Configuring Content Management 9

Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9

Configuring the Learning Portal 9

Configuring Content Player 9

Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9

Configuring Adobe Connect 9

Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9

Copying Logical Ports 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components

SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)

For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution

PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6

We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage

ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation

Document Storage LocationDocument Location

Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide

servicesapcominstguides

Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System

Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description

SAP Solution Manager

SAP Library helpsapcom

Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system

SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes

servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide

Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)

servicesapcomti

Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide

These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides

Implementation Guide (IMG)

This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7

configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess

Business Scenario Description

This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component

SAP Library

This documentation describes the different SAP components

System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample

Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system

Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed

Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios

You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade

Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed

Creating an RFC Destination

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)

R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 3: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 3

Icons in Body Text

Icon Meaning

Caution

Example

Note

Recommendation

Syntax

Additional icons are used in SAP Library documentation to help you identify different types ofinformation at a glance For more information see Help on Help General InformationClasses and Information Classes for Business Information Warehouse on the first page of anyversion of SAP Library

Typographic Conventions

Type Style Description

Example text Words or characters quoted from the screen These include fieldnames screen titles pushbuttons labels menu names menu pathsand menu options

Cross-references to other documentation

Example text Emphasized words or phrases in body text graphic titles and tabletitles

EXAMPLE TEXT Technical names of system objects These include report namesprogram names transaction codes table names and key concepts of aprogramming language when they are surrounded by body text forexample SELECT and INCLUDE

Example text Output on the screen This includes file and directory names and theirpaths messages names of variables and parameters source text andnames of installation upgrade and database tools

Example text Exact user entry These are words or characters that you enter in thesystem exactly as they appear in the documentation

ltExample textgt Variable user entry Angle brackets indicate that you replace thesewords and characters with appropriate entries to make entries in thesystem

EXAMPLE TEXT Keys on the keyboard for example F2 or ENTER

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8

System Connections 9

Creating an RFC Destination 9

Creating a Trusted Relationship 9

Importing the WAS Certificate 9

Swapping Public Keys 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9

Configuring Content Management 9

Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9

Configuring the Learning Portal 9

Configuring Content Player 9

Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9

Configuring Adobe Connect 9

Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9

Copying Logical Ports 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components

SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)

For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution

PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6

We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage

ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation

Document Storage LocationDocument Location

Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide

servicesapcominstguides

Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System

Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description

SAP Solution Manager

SAP Library helpsapcom

Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system

SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes

servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide

Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)

servicesapcomti

Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide

These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides

Implementation Guide (IMG)

This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7

configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess

Business Scenario Description

This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component

SAP Library

This documentation describes the different SAP components

System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample

Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system

Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed

Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios

You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade

Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed

Creating an RFC Destination

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)

R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 4: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 4

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAP Enterprise Learning 7

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applications and Business Scenarios 8

System Connections 9

Creating an RFC Destination 9

Creating a Trusted Relationship 9

Importing the WAS Certificate 9

Swapping Public Keys 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional) 9

Configuring Content Management 9

Using HTTPS to Access Content Management Systems 9

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional) 9

Configuring the Learning Portal 9

Configuring Content Player 9

Setting Up Learner Authorizations 9

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver (Optional) 9

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a Virtual Learning Room 9

Configuring Adobe Connect 9

Configuring LSO Back-End System for Adobe Connect 9

Copying Logical Ports 9

Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment 9

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components

SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)

For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution

PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6

We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage

ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation

Document Storage LocationDocument Location

Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide

servicesapcominstguides

Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System

Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description

SAP Solution Manager

SAP Library helpsapcom

Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system

SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes

servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide

Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)

servicesapcomti

Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide

These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides

Implementation Guide (IMG)

This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7

configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess

Business Scenario Description

This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component

SAP Library

This documentation describes the different SAP components

System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample

Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system

Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed

Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios

You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade

Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed

Creating an RFC Destination

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)

R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 5: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 5

Configuration of SAP Learning SolutionSAPEnterprise LearningUseTo configure SAP Learning Solution you perform the steps described below with theexception of the configuration of the Virtual Learning Room To configure SAP EnterpriseLearning you must perform all of the steps for configuring SAP Learning Solution and alsothe steps for configuring the Virtual Learning Room

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The following documentation is valid for SAP Learning Solution and SAP Enterprise Learningwith the relevant release of the associated SAP application components

SAP Learning Solution SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Learning Solution SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Application Components and Release

SAP Application Components with Lowest Release

SAP Enterprise Learning SAP Enhancement Package 2 for SAP ERP 60

LSOFE 602 (SAP Learning Solution Frontend)

LSOAU 602 (SAP Learning Solution Authoring Environment)

LSOCP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Content Player)

LSOOP 602 (SAP Learning Solution Offline Player)

ELE ADOBE CONNECT 602 (SAP Acrobat Connect Professionalapplications by Adobe)

For more information see SAP Service Marketplace atservicesapcomlearningsolution

PrerequisitesThe system landscape has already been set up using the master guide and additionaldocumentation For information about other available documentation and where the most up-to-date versions are published see Documentation Landscape for SAP Solutions andBusiness Scenarios [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6

We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage

ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation

Document Storage LocationDocument Location

Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide

servicesapcominstguides

Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System

Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description

SAP Solution Manager

SAP Library helpsapcom

Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system

SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes

servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide

Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)

servicesapcomti

Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide

These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides

Implementation Guide (IMG)

This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7

configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess

Business Scenario Description

This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component

SAP Library

This documentation describes the different SAP components

System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample

Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system

Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed

Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios

You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade

Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed

Creating an RFC Destination

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)

R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 6: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 6

We are interested in your feedback to help us improve the configurationdocumentation Should you find any errors in the documentation create amessage for the SAP Learning Solution (PE-LSO) component on SAP ServiceMarketplace at servicesapcommessage

ActivitiesYou perform the individual configuration activities required for the implementation in the orderspecified

Documentation Landscape for SAP Applicationsand Business ScenariosThis documentation gives you an overview of the most important sources of information thatyou need in connection with SAP applications business scenarios and business processesMake sure that you always use the most up-to-date documents for your implementation

Document Storage LocationDocument Location

Master Guide Installation Guide and UpgradeGuide

servicesapcominstguides

Implementation Guide (IMG) SAP System

Business Scenario Description BusinessProcess Description

SAP Solution Manager

SAP Library helpsapcom

Comment Also available under Help SAPLibrary in the SAP system

SAP Notes servicesapcomnotes to search fornotes

servicesapcominstguides listed byinstallation and upgrade guide

Technical infrastructure (for example hardwaresizing platforms network security)

servicesapcomti

Description of the DocumentsMaster Guide Installation Guide and Upgrade Guide

These documents describe how you install or upgrade the system landscape requiredfor a business scenario The central initial access document for every SAP applicationis the Master Guide For each business scenario it lists the SAP applicationcomponents and third-party applications required and refers to their installation andupgrade guides These guides are Component Installation Guides Business ScenarioUpgrade Guides and Component Upgrade Guides

Implementation Guide (IMG)

This tool enables you to adapt SAP systems to meet specific customer requirementsThe IMG contains the IMG activities for all SAP components with generaldocumentation The structure is component-oriented and has no reference to abusiness scenario If this reference is required it is created as follows By the

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7

configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess

Business Scenario Description

This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component

SAP Library

This documentation describes the different SAP components

System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample

Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system

Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed

Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios

You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade

Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed

Creating an RFC Destination

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)

R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 7: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 7

configuration documentation with a textual link to the IMG and by the content of SAPSolution Manager that links to the IMG activities for each business scenario andprocess

Business Scenario Description

This document describes how a business scenario runs once all components havebeen installed and configured For each business process of a business scenario thereis a business process description and a component view as graphical representationThis shows the process steps in the respective SAP component

SAP Library

This documentation describes the different SAP components

System ConnectionsPurposeConnecting the systems in an SAP system landscape includes the following tasks forexample

Defining logical systems and where relevant assigning clients in the OnlineTransaction Processing (OLTP) system

Specifying the systems servers clients distribution models and so on in the systemin which the SAP application component is installed

Completing the configuration and performing other activities required in the context ofan SAP system landscape

PrerequisitesThe system landscape is installed

Installation was done according to the Master Guide of the SAP application theinstallation and upgrade guide for the SAP components and business scenarios

You are familiar with the relevant SAP Notes for installation configuration andupgrade

Process FlowPerform the steps described below in the order in which they are listed

Creating an RFC Destination

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe connection between the back-end system of SAP Learning Solution and SAP WebApplication Server (as of Basis 610) is handled by Remote Function Call (RFC connection)

R3 systems are able to build trusted relationships to one another If a calling R3 system isknown to the called system as a trusted system no password is required The calling system

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 8: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 8

must be registered as a trusted system in the called system The called system is indicated asa trusting system

You set up the connection in this step

ProcedureNavigation

Menu Path IMG Activity

Training and Event Management SAPLearning Solution Learning Portal LMSConfiguration

Set RFC Connection

1 Enter the RFC destination

Ensure that the RFC destination in SAP Web Application Server is calledSAP_LSO_BACKEND It does not matter whether it is a logical destinationthat references an R3 connection or if it is an R3 connection with this name

Ensure that you use uppercase since the system will not recognize the nameotherwise

2 In the Connection to R3 System field enter connection type 3 for a connection to anABAP system

3 In the Description field enter a short text for the RFC connection

4 Select the LogonSecurity tab page

a Choose Yes to ensure that the calling system is registered as a trusted systemin the target system

b Select the logon language

If you leave the Logon Language field blank the logon language of the callingsystem is applied

c Set the Current User indicator

If you set this indicator the user name with which the user logged on to thesystem is used

Creating a Trusted Relationship

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseYou can create a trusted relationship for the connection between SAP Learning Solutionback-end system and SAP Web Application Server To do this you define the calling systemas a reliable system (a trusted system) in the system being called The system being calledis the trusting system

For more information see RFC TrustedTrusting Systems [External]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 9: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 9

PrerequisitesBefore you can define a trusted system you must have first created a destination forthis trusted system in the trusting system You have created a Remote Function Call(RFC) connection between the back-end system and SAP Web Application Server

The RFC users have the relevant authorizations in the trusting system (authorizationobject S_RFCACL)

You can use the function module AUTHORITY_CHECK_TRUSTED_SYSTEMto check the authorization for the logged-on user in the trusting system

Procedure

1 Call transaction SMT1

2 Choose Create

3 In the dialog box enter the destination of the client system

4 Confirm your entries

When the entries are confirmed an RFC logon occurs in the client system to exchangenecessary information between the systems

ResultWhen a trusted relationship has been successfully created a trusted entry for the clientsystem is displayed

Importing the WAS Certificate

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseTo be able to use ratings you must import the certificate for the Web Application Server(WAS) of the front-end system for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) into the back-end system (SAP ECC 600)

ProcedureEnter the transaction code STRUSTSSO2

Perform the following steps in the system with the LSO600 package

1 Choose Certificate Import

2 Choose the SAP System tab page

3 In the Destination field enter the RFC destination of the Web Application Server

4 Select SSO2 as the application

5 Confirm your entries

The logon dialog box of the Web Application Server appears

6 Log on to the Web Application Server

7 Choose Add to Certificate List

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 10: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 10

8 Choose Insert in ACL

9 Save your entries

Swapping Public Keys

You must perform this activity only if the front end and back end of your SAPLearning Solution run on different systems

UseThe public key of the Web Application Server of the front-end system for SAP LearningSolution (LSOFE component) must be communicated to the back-end system for theelectronic participation confirmation so that the back-end system can verify the signature ofthe WAS

You must perform the following steps

Create Personal Security Environments (PSEs) in the back-end and front-end systemsfor the SAP Learning Solution

Export the created PSE from the front-end system

Import the exported PSE to the back-end system

Creating PSE for the SAP Learning SolutionThis step must be performed in both the back-end and the front-end systems

Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 Choose Environment Maintain SSF Parameters

2 Choose New Entries

3 Choose E-Learning (or ELEARN) as the SSF application

4 Accept all of the data provided by the system as default data

5 Save your entries

6 Go to the Trust Manager initial screen

7 Check that E-Learning has been added as a new node on the left side of the screen

Exporting the Public Key from the Front-End SystemLog on to the front-end system and start the Trust Manager using the transaction codeSTRUST

Perform the following steps

1 On the left side of the screen select the node E-Learning (or ELEARN)

2 Right-click the node and choose Create from the context menu

A dialog box appears

3 Enter E-Learning as the name for example You can accept all other data withoutchanging any of it

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 11: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 11

4 Check that there is no longer a red cross displayed before the E-Learning node andthat a new PSE was created

5 Export the PSE as a PSE file (for example elearnpse) to your local hard drive Selectthe E-Learning node and choose PSE Export

6 Save your entries

Importing the Public Key into the Back-End SystemLog on to the back-end system Start the Trust Manager using the transaction code STRUST

Perform the following steps

1 In the left side of the screen select the File node

2 Choose PSE Import

3 Open the PSE file (for example elearnpse) exported from the front-end system

4 Choose PSE Save As

A dialog box appears

5 Choose SSF Application and enter the name of the SAP Learning Solution E-Learning(or ELEARN) as the application

6 Confirm your entry

7 Check that the red cross in front of the E-Learning node is no longer available

8 Save your entries

Integration in an Enterprise Portal (Optional)PurposeThis section describes how to integrate the Web Application Server (WAS) of the front-endsystem for SAP Learning Solution (LSOFE component) in an enterprise portal You mustperform the following steps

Import the SAP Learning Solution iView into the enterprise portal

Set up Single Sign-On

Assign the pages of the SAP Learning Solution to individual roles

The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does not include a licenseto use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAPEnterprise Learning product

The Manage Virtual Learning Rooms iView is part of the HCM EnterpriseLearning business function If you also implement SAP Enterprise Learning youmust perform the role assignment for the InstructorTutor portal role for theManage Virtual Learning Rooms page to make the page available in theenterprise portal

For more information see Integration in an Enterprise Portal Role Assignment[Page 27]

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 12: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 12

Downloading and Importing from the iView StudioTo integrate the SAP Learning Solution in your enterprise portal you need the SAP LearningSolution iView and a page on which the iView is displayed You can find all components fordownload in the Content Catalog of the iView Studio at the Internet addresswwwsdnsapcomsdncontentportfoliosdn Documentation for downloading andimporting portal component is in the Help section

This package includes an iView for integrating WAS pages in the enterprise portal and a pageon which the iView can be displayed A workset or role is not supplied You must assign rolesmanually For information about how to do this see ldquoRole Assignmentrdquo

Maintaining the System LandscapeThe SAP Learning Solution iView uses the alias SAP_R3_HumanResources to access theWAS on which the LSOFE component is installed To enable the iView to access this WASyou must first create a system for the LSO back-end system in the system landscape Youmust then maintain the WAS access data for this system Finally you must create the aliasSAP_HCM_LSO for this system

Perform the following steps

1 To start the System Landscape Editor choose System Administration SystemConfiguration System Landscape

2 Create a new back-end system

a Edit the access data for the back-end system under the Connector categoryEnter the WAS client as the client

b Edit the Web Application Server (WAS) category Enter the host and the path

c Create a new alias with the name SAP_R3_HumanResources for this entry

Maintenance of the system landscape is described in the portal documentationat helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver

User Mapping Single Sign-OnThe Enterprise Portal and Web Application Server use different logons and generally do nothave the same user administration So that a learner does not have to log on to the EnterprisePortal and the Web Application Server separately the Web Application Server can apply thelogon from the Enterprise Portal (Single Sign-On)

For more detailed documentation on this see the Portal Administration Guide atthe Internet address helpsapcom under SAP NetWeaver 70 SAPNetWeaver Library Security Guide User Administration and Authentication

User Authentication and Single Sign-On Authentication on J2EE EngineConfiguring Authentication Mechanisms Using Logon Tickets for Single Sign-On Configuring the Use of Logon Tickets Configuring the SAP WebASABAP to Accept Logon Tickets from the J2EE Engine

This step is optional However we do recommend that you use Single Sign-On

Role AssignmentThe Business Package for SAP Learning Solution consists of one iView and one page Aworkset or role is not supplied

So that a portal user can access SAP Learning Solution in the portal you must assign thepage of the SAP Learning Solution to its portal role

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 13: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 13

For detailed documentation on this see the Help Portal at the Internet addresshelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration Portal

Content Administration Roles and Worksets Adding Content to Rolesand Worksets Adding Objects as a Delta Link

Configuring Content Management SystemUseThere are three steps involved when you configure Content Management System (CMS)

Setting up a root folder

Creating users

Entering authorizations

Setting Up a Root FolderTo store course content in the CMS you must create a repository or storage area (root folder)that is used exclusively by SAP Learning Solution

There are two ways to create a root folder

Creating a directoryYou can create a separate folder in an existing repository In the standard installation of theCM the documents repository is suitable for this

To create a separate folder in an existing repository perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Navigate to a folder for example documents in which you want to create the rootfolder

4 Generate the root folder Choose Folder New Folder For clarityrsquos sake ensurethat the label for the root folder refers to the relevant SAP back-end system (in theframework of SAP Learning Solution)

You could use KP7_100Rep for an SAP system KP7 client 100 for example

Create a repositoryYou can create a new separate repository

For more information see the documentation for administering the CMS

Under Structure select the implemented SAP Enterprise Portal and the service pack that youuse

WebDAV Features

You should be able to access the root folder using the WebDAV protocol This is configuredaccordingly in the standard CMS For more information see the ldquoWebDAV Protocolldquo sectionof the administration documentation for CMS

You must also be able to set locks The documents repository fulfils this prerequisite If youset up your own repository you must ensure that it fulfils this prerequisite too For more

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 14: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 14

information see the ldquoWebDAV Repository Managerldquo section of the administrationdocumentation for CMS

Accessing the Root Folder

You access the root folder through the authoring tool using the WebDAV protocol andthrough the Content Player using HTTP

The access URL is identical in both cases You can determine the URL using the propertiesof the repository directory created Perform the following steps

1 Start the portal

2 Switch to the folder that was created

3 Choose Goto Details

4 Choose Settings Properties

5 Choose the Links tab page You will find the full access URL under WebDAV URL oryou can use the following address

ltprotocolgtltJ2EE-servergtltportgtirjgokmdocsltCMS_FOLDERgt

Setting Up UsersRoot Folder

To access the root folder you must enter the relevant users The users require the necessaryaccess authorizations

The access authentication must be done using Basic AuthenticationAuthentication per NTLM is not possible for SAP Learning Solution

Content Player

In the Content Player you can enter any user for access to the portal

Authoring EnvironmentIn the Authoring Environment access to the portal can be set up in two ways

You can access the portal with the same user you use to access the SAP back-endsystem The users in the portal and SAP system must either be automaticallysynchronized (see ldquoSynchronizing SAP System User Data with Corporate LDAPDirectoryldquo in the Administration Guide on the portal) or specifically made consistentwith each other each time

Access takes place with an individual user that the author enters when he or she startsonline playing

The access type can be set during the back-end configuration for the Authoring Environmentin Customizing for SAP Learning Solution

Entering AuthorizationsAccess to the root folder must be completely unrestricted or restricted to users in theAuthoring Environment Content Player

To define authorizations for the root folder

1 Start the portal

2 Choose Content Administration KM Content Repositories

3 Switch to the folder that was created

4 Choose Goto Details

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 15: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 15

5 Choose Settings Links

You now have three options for setting up authorizations

a Grant unrestricted authorizations everybodyfull control

b Assign specific authorizations for individual users

Read authorization for Content Player users

Unrestricted access for all users of the Authoring Environment

c Assign authorizations based on roles

Create two roles (Content Player Users Authoring Users)

Assign users the respective role

Assign the roles the appropriate authorization

Check

1 In a WebDAV client (such as Windows web folders) check whether you can write andread in the root folder that was created

2 Also check whether you can read a file created in a Web folder using a normal browser

3 After the check delete all files you created for test purposes so that the root folder isempty again

Alternative Content Management Systems

If you do not want to use SAPrsquos Content Management you can use another CMS as long as itsupports WebDAV protocol with compliance level 2 For more information about WebDAVProtocol see wwwwebdavorg

Examples of WebDAV-enabled servers are the Apache Web-Server (version 1323 or above)or Microsoft IIS (version 50)

In this case you cannot use the full-text search engine (TREX)

Authentication with the WebDAV server can only take place using ldquoBasicAuthenticationrdquo

Using HTTPS to Access Content ManagementSystemsUseIf for security reasons Content Management is to be accessed from the authoringenvironment using HTTPS you must first install the relevant security components in theauthoring environment

Procedure

1 Install JRE 142 or JRE 150

2 Install JCE Unlimited Strength Jurisdiction Policy Files from SUN in JRE 142 or JRE150

You can download the file at javasuncomj2se142downloadhtml This file alsocontains detailed installation instructions

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 16: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 16

3 Download the SAP Cryptolibraries for 630640 J2EE

4 Open the SDA file (zip file)

5 Copy the jar files it contains to the jrelibext directory of the installed JRE 142 or JRE150

6 Start the authoring environment and check that HTTP support has been installedcorrectly

Settings for the TREX Search Engine (Optional)UseThe use of a TREX search machine in the SAP Learning Solution is optional If you do notuse a search engine authors cannot search for content

You must also create a new index that is used exclusively by the SAP Learning Solution

Procedure

1 Start the portal

2 Log on with a user that has administrator authorizations

3 Choose KM Admin Index Administration

4 Choose Create to generate a new index

5 Enter the following parameters for the new index

Choose any identifier as the ID

For clarityrsquos sake the ID should refer to the appropriate R3 system It could forexample stand for an R3 system KP7 KP7Index

Enter TREX Search as the Service Category

Choose Folder to assign a folder to the index

You then come to a selection of all the directories available Switch to the rootfolder and assign this to the index

The URL of the TREX name server and the ID of the newly created index mustbe used to configure the authoring tool

It is as follows tcpipserverport

Server is the name of the TREX name server and Port that of the TCPIP port towhich the name server is configured

Configuring the Learning PortalUseConfiguration of the Learning Portal comprises the following steps

Adding own pages to the Learning Portal

Adjusting style sheets

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 17: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 17

Including Your Own Pages in the Learning PortalYou can change the pages used in the Learning Portal in two ways

Replace entire pages

Replace pages in a particular context

Replacing an Entire PageYou should replace the informationhtm page with a customer-specific page

Enter the transaction code SM31

Perform the following steps

1 Access view maintenance LSPAGE_ALIAS_C

2 Enter the page that is to replace the standard information page

3 Enter the relevant (customer-specific) BSP application

To replace the standard information page enter

Alias Info page

Plan version Empty

Object type Empty

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page infohtm

To replace the detail page for course types with a customer-specific page enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01 (or blank)

Object type D

Object ID Empty

BSP application z_learning

BSP page trainingstypehtm

You can use this principle to replace any pages in the portal

Replacing a Page in a Particular ContextYou can also replace pages in a particular context You may want to do this if you want todisplay a separate page for a particular course group All other pages are displayed using thestandard pages of the Learning Portal

To change a page in a particular context enter

Alias Details

Plan version 01

Object type L

Object ID 55500555

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 18: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 18

BSP application z_learning

BSP page spezial_group_pagehtm

Adjusting a Style SheetIf the Learning Portal is used within an enterprise portal the style sheet for the enterpriseportal is used The documentation on the Enterprise Portal explains how you can adjust thepresentation Fore more information see the documentation about SAP NetWeaver athelpsapcomnw2004s under Business Server Pages FAQ How do I get a BSP intoa Portal Environment

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is explained in the documentation on BSP applications For informationabout this see Business Server Pages FAQ How Can I Customize a BSP Application

If you run the Learning Portal without an enterprise portal you can still make adjustmentsThe exact procedure is described in the documentation for Business Server Pages athelpsapcomnw2004s For more information choose SAP NetWeaver Library SAPNetWeaver by Key Capability Application Platform by Key Capability ABAP Technology

UI Technology Web UI Technology Business Server Pages ProgrammingEnvironment Style Sheets

Configuring Content PlayerUseConfiguration of the Content Player comprises the following steps

Creating a user

To enable the Content Player to log onto the back-end system it needs to have a userin the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that are groupedtogether in the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

The user you create for the Content Player in the back-end system does not have to bea dialog user

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

You can make and check the technical settings for the Content Player using theconfiguration interface httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Adjusting style sheets

Style sheets are used to control the presentation of the pages in the Content PlayerThe style sheets enable you to adjust the pages according to customer-specificrequirements

Configuring the player and checking the configuration

1 Make the settings for the Content Player in Customizing for SAP Learning SolutionExecute the following IMG activities

All IMG activities under Learning Portal Content Player

Learning Portal Select Learning Strategies

Note that you absolutely must perform this step to ensure that the configurationis complete

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 19: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 19

2 Open the configuration page httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig

Replace ltJ2EE-servergtltportgt with the path for your AS Java installation

Access to the configuration interface is restricted to users with administrationauthorization

3 Choose New Configuration and enter data in the required fields

Entries for Configuration

Field Description ExampleSystem Name of the SAP ECC system used

(back-end or training managementsystem)

EL1

Client Client used in the back-end system 100

Application Server Address of the message server 1052657371 ormyserverdomaincom ormyserver

System Number System number of the back-endsystem used

00

User User who writes learning progress tothe back-end system

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

LSO_CP

Password Users password

Language Users logon language (optional) EN or DE

CMS User User who downloads learning contentfrom the Content Management System(CMS)

For more information see SAP ServiceMarketplace in the security guide forSAP Learning Solution atservicesapcomsecurityguideunder SAP ERP 2005 Security Guidesin the following sections

User Management

Authorizations

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

CMS_User

CMS Password CMS users password

If the Content Management Systemdoes not require the user to log onthen this field can remain empty

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 20: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 20

4 To make the values you entered available in the Content Player choose Update Youdo not have to start the Content Player again

5 Go back

6 You can select from the following options

To display the new configuration in the list of available configurations choose Refresh

To check the validity of the newly created or an existing configuration choose Check

To change an existing configuration choose Configure

To delete an existing configuration choose Delete

Result

Once you have configured the Content Player successfully the following data is displayed onthe httpltJ2EE-servergtltportgtlmsmediatorconfig page

The access data used to call the ERP (back-end) system

The configuration parameters in the back-end system that are relevant for theContent Player

Whether the Content Management System can be accessed

Username=rsquoLSO_CPrsquo Systemname=rsquoEL1rsquo Client=rsquo100rsquoHost=rsquolsotmmycompanycorprsquo Language=rsquodersquoSystemNumber=rsquo00rsquo EnablePoolSharing=rsquotruersquoMaxConnection=rsquo50rsquo ABAPDEBUG=false

CPCFGRSURL =httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

CPCFGREPUS = CMS_User

Http-Repository [ServerURL=

httpcmsmycompanycorpportirjgokmdocsdocumentsmy_lso-directory

ok

Creating UsersEnter the transaction code PFCG

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_COURSEPLAYER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Content Player user

Adjusting Style SheetsThe style sheets are delivered with the LSOCP 602 component and are copied to the serversubdirectories of the SAP J2EE Engine installation (server0 server1 server2 and so on)

The path for a standalone installation is

usrsapJ2EJC00j2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

The path for an Add-In installation (J2EE and ABAP stack) is

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 21: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 21

usrsapSYSTEMNAMEdvebmgsSYSTEMNUMBERj2eeclusterserver0appssapcomcomsaphcmlswebappsservlet_jsplmsrootstyle

There are several files in this directory Their functions are summarized in the following table

Style Sheet Function

maincss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the actual coursecontent is displayed

footercss Controls the presentation of the frame in which the navigation baris displayed

toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents

acc_toccss Controls the presentation of the table of contents when it isaccessed in accessibility mode

navviewiconscss Controls the presentation of the learning path

The following provides numerous adjustments as examples

Adjusting the Background ColorsTo adjust the background colors in the upper and lower frames proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 In the statement block for the element BODY search for the line

background-colour

3 Change the color code according to your requirements

4 If necessary repeat steps 1 to 3 for the element lsoBdyHeaderlsoBdyFooterurBdyStdand for the BODY element in the file footer_ltrrtlcssin

Incorporating the Company LogoTo embed the company logo in the upper frame proceed as follows

1 Open the file commoncss in an editor of your choice

2 Add a new CSS statement block for the lsoBdyHeader element in the following linesa background-image url(imageslogogif)

b background-repeat no-repeat

c background-position right

3 Copy the company logo under the name specified above to the specified position onthe J2EE server

Setting Up Learner AuthorizationsUseTo be able to access the back-end system from the Learning Portal (WAS) each learnerrequires a user in the back-end system The user requires various authorizations that aregrouped together in the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

The user you create for the learner in the back-end system does not have to be a dialog user

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 22: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 22

ProcedureEnter the transaction code PFCGPerform the following steps

1 Copy the SAP_HR_LSO_LEARNER role

2 Adjust the authorization objects to suit your system environment

3 Assign the new role to the Learner user

Integrating Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver(Optional)UseThis section describes how you integrate the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 This stepis necessary if you are to be able to use Collaboration Rooms in the Learning Portal of theSAP Learning Solution

Collaboration Rooms allow you to create virtual learning groups All learners who havebooked themselves onto a course to which a Collaboration Room is assigned can asparticipants of such a virtual learning group access the functions in this Collaboration Room

PrerequisitesYou must use SAP Enterprise Portal 60 to implement the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver04

Old versions in particular the SAP Enterprise Portal 50 and small Patch Levelsof the SAP Enterprise Portal 60 are not supported

ProcedurePerform the following steps

1 Install and configure the Collaboration for SAP NetWeaver 04 component Proceed asdescribed in the Collaboration for SAP Enterprise 2004SAP Learning Solution 200Installation Guide in addition to Note 717986

If problems should arise during installation of the Collaboration componentproceed as described in the ldquoTroubleshootingldquo section of Note 717986

2 Carry out the IMG activities for Collaboration in Customizing of the SAP LearningSolution in the sequence specified Select SAP Learning Solution TrainingManagement Integration Collaboration Room for SAP NetWeaver

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 23: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 23

SAP Enterprise Learning Configuring a VirtualLearning RoomSAP Important Disclaimers and Legal InformationSAP offers a basic learning solution software product called SAP Learning Solution and apremium learning solution software product with additional features and functionality calledSAP Enterprise Learning The license to use the SAP Learning Solution product does notinclude a license to use the HCM Enterprise Learning business function which is exclusivelyavailable to customers who have purchased a separate license to use the SAP EnterpriseLearning product If you would like to acquire the use rights to the HCM Enterprise Learningbusiness function contact your SAP Account Executive for additional information regardingpricing and availability of the SAP Enterprise Learning product

UseSAP Enterprise Learning enables you to set up a virtual learning room using Adobe Connect

Adobe Connect is a Web communication system that you can use to prepare Web-basedcommunication solutions for training courses marketing company-wide Web conferencesand online collaborations

PrerequisitesIn Activating Business Functions in the SAP Reference IMG you must have activated theHCM Enterprise Learning business function in addition to the HCM Learning Solution 01business function This business function includes the user rights for using Adobe Connectand is available only if you have obtained a license to use the SAP Enterprise Learningproduct

Procedure

1 Perform the configuration for Adobe Connect

For more information about installing and configuring Adobe Connect see SAPnote 1070578

2 Perform the configuration for the SAP Learning Solution back-end system

3 If necessary copy the required logical ports

Configuring Adobe ConnectUseThe configuration of the servlet containing the interface to SAP Learning Solution is saved inthe file [adobe_connect_root_folder]appservlibsap_servlet_configxml In this file you mustspecify the trusted hosts that can call Adobe Connect

For the servlet you also require a user with administrator rights

Editing File sap_servlet_configxml

1 Enter the application servers of the SAP Learning Solution back-end system as trustedhosts to make sure that they can communicate with Adobe Connect

If you want to enter several application servers use a separate lthostgt tag within thelttrusted_hostsgt tag for each application server (see section Example)

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 24: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 24

2 If the Adobe Connect server does not run on the standard HTTP port change the portnumber

Creating Users with Administrator Rights

1 In Adobe Connect create a user with the name AdminLSO

2 Add the user to the user group with administrator rights

3 If you want to use another user you must enter the user in the filesap_servlet_configxml

4 Start the Adobe Connect Enterprise Server

The servlet is now ready to process queries

Checking File customini

1 Check whether the following lines exist in the file[adobe_connect_root_folder]customini

HTTP_AUTH_HEADER=x-user-id

HTTP_AUTH_TRUSTED_HOSTS=localhost127001

2 If these lines do not exist add them

Examplesap_servlet_configxmlltxml version=10 encoding=utf-8gt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

lthostgt

applicationserver1com

lthostgt

lthostgt

applicationserver2com

lthostgt

lttrusted_hostsgt

ltadmin_usergt

AdminLSO

ltadmin_usergt

lthttp_timeoutgt

10000

lthttp_timeoutgt

ltprotocolgt

http

ltprotocolgt

lthostgt

localhost

lthostgt

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 25: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 25

ltportgt

80

ltportgt

ltpathgt

apixml

ltpathgt

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

x-user-id

ltexternal_user_id_headergt

ltverbosegt

no

ltverbosegt

ltsap_servlet_configgt

Configuring LSO Back-End System for AdobeConnectUseYou must set up an HTTP connection between the SAP Learning Solution back-end systemand the Adobe Connect server using the prefix sap in the path

PrerequisitesIn the file sap_servlet_configxml you have entered the LSO back-end system as a trustedhost

Procedure

1 Start transaction SM59

2 Choose HTTP Connections to Ext Server

3 Choose Create

4 Enter the RFC destination SAPLSOVLROOM

5 Save your entries

6 Choose Connection Test to check whether the RFC destination was created correctly

7 Select the Response Body tab page and check the messages

ResultThe connection test displays the following data

Connection Test Messages and Their Meaning

Test Message Meaning

Trusted host check Successful The current message serverwas configured correctly as atrusted host

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 26: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 26

Not successful Check whether all messageservers of the LSO back-endsystem are entered as trustedhosts in the filesap_servlet_configxml

Connection test Successful The connection to AdobeConnect was set up

Not successful The connection to AdobeConnect was not set up

User test Successful The user with administrationrights was created andconfigured correctly in AdobeConnect

Not successful Check whether the user withadministrator rights wascreated and configuredcorrectly as described inConfiguring Adobe Connect[Page 9]

Copying Logical PortsUseFor the integration of SAP Learning Solution and Adobe Connect the following logical portsmust be available in the relevant clients

CO_LSOLS_ACCESS_URL_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_ENROLLMENT_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CANCEL_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CHANGE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_CREATE_REQUEST

CO_LSOLS_LA_ERP_SIMPLE_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_PROGRESS_QUERY

CO_LSOLS_UNENROLLMENT_REQUEST

ProcedureIf the logical ports are not available copy them in the transaction LPCONFIG from the client000

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor

Page 27: LSO Config

SAP Documentation 01082007

Configuration SAP EhP2 for ERP 60 27

Integration in an Enterprise Portal RoleAssignmentUseTo make virtual learning rooms available in the Enterprise Portal you must assign theInstructorTutor portal role to the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

Procedure

1 In the Enterprise Portal tree structure choose Instructor and Tutor Pages

2 Select the Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page

3 In the context menu choose Add Page to Role Delta Link

For more detailed documentaion on this subject see the Help Portal athelpsapcomnw04 under SAP NetWeaver People Integration PortalAdministration Guide Content Administration iViews Assigning iViews toUsers Adding Content Objects to Roles and Worksets Adding Objects as aDelta Link

ResultThe Manage Virtual Learning Rooms page was added and is available in the EnterprisePortal under InstructorTutor